Ford 2010 Mustang Owners Manual

Ford-2010-Mustang-Owners-Manual-762348 ford-2010-mustang-owners-manual-762348

Ford-2010-Mustang-Owners-Manual-123389 ford-2010-mustang-owners-manual-123389

2010 Mustang to the manual 65c49adf-dd7a-40c1-b387-cf6474a87eb5

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2010-Ford-Mustang-Owners-Manual-815175 ford-2010-ford-mustang-owners-manual-815175 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 312

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster

4
12

Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
Message center

12
17
20

Entertainment Systems

Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
USB port
Satellite radio information
Navigation system
SYNC威

Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Navigation system based climate control
Rear window defroster

Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement

Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control

41
43
47
50
50

51
51
54
58

59
59
64
64

72
72
73
76
79
80

Locks and Security

Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system

91
91
101

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing

Driving
Starting
Brakes
AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Rear-view camera system

Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher control
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Temporary mobility kit
Wheel lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing

Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)

Cleaning
2

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

107
107
115
129
140

160
160
162
175
180
187
189

190
190
195
197
204
209

212
212
213
214
214
222
227
236
237
242

244
250
250

251

Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data

259
261
264
269
271
277
292
294
295
299

Accessories

302

Ford Extended Service Plan

304

Index

307

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an
accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel
supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden
vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the
Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
5

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
6

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling;
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC威 or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC威 supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
7

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威 supplement
for more information.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving
and that you comply with all applicable laws.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert

See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt

Airbag - Front

Airbag - Side

Child Seat Lower
Anchor

Child Seat Tether
Anchor

Brake System

Anti-Lock Brake System

Parking Brake System

Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based

Parking Aid System

Stability Control System

Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch

Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front

Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset

Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield
Defrost/Demist

Rear Window
Defrost/Demist

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear

Power Window Lockout

Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock

Interior Luggage
Compartment Release

Panic Alarm

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Temperature

Do Not Open When Hot

Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks

Battery Acid

Explosive Gas

Fan Warning

Power Steering Fluid

Maintain Correct Fluid
Level

Service Engine Soon

Engine Air Filter

Passenger Compartment
Air Filter

Jack

Check Fuel Cap

Low Tire Pressure
Warning

MAX
MIN

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Base instrument cluster (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Optional instrument cluster (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
12

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Service engine soon: The service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine
soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.

Check fuel fill inlet (if
equipped): Illuminates when the
fuel fill inlet may not be properly
closed. Continued driving with this
light on may cause the service
engine soon warning light to come
on. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
13

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
time, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.

Anti-lock brake system (if
equipped): If the ABS light stays
ABS
illuminated or continues to flash, a
malfunction has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in
the indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction
with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure (if
equipped): Illuminates when the oil
pressure falls below the normal
range, refer to Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature:
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.

Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. For more information
on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in
the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
active: Flashes when the traction
control is active. If the light remains
on a malfunction has been detected;
contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
off light: Illuminates when the
traction control has been disabled
(by the driver or as a result of a
system failure). Refer to the
Driving chapter for more
information.
15

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
O/D OFF (automatic
O/D
transmission): Illuminates when
OFF
the overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned off;
refer to the Driving chapter. If the light does not illuminate, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Low fuel (if equipped):
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at or near empty.
Refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
Door ajar (if equipped):
Illuminates when the ignition is in
the on position and any of the doors
or the hood/trunk are open.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft
system has been activated.
Electronic throttle control:
Illuminates when the engine has
defaulted to a “limp-home”
operation. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
16

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
GAUGES
Base instrument cluster gauges (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Optional instrument cluster gauges (V6 shown; V8 similar)

Refer to Message center in this chapter to select one of six preset colors
or three user definable colors (MyColor威) for the nighttime gauge
backlighting.
17

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.
• V6 instrument cluster

• V8 instrument cluster

Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.

Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.
• Base instrument cluster:

• Optional instrument cluster:
Refer to Message center in this
chapter for how to switch the
display from Metric to English.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the distance of individual journeys.
• Base instrument cluster:
Press the reset button to select Trip
A and Trip B. Press and hold the
reset button to reset the trip
odometer to zero.
• Optional instrument cluster:
Press and release the message
center INFO button until TRIP A
mode appears in the display. Press
the button again to select the TRIP
B feature. Press and hold the
RESET button to reset the trip odometer to zero.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine.
• V6 instrument cluster

• V8 instrument cluster

Battery voltage gauge (if
equipped): Indicates the battery
voltage when the ignition is in the
on position. If the pointer moves
and stays outside the normal
operating range, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge (if
equipped): Indicates engine oil
pressure. The needle should stay in
the normal operating range
(between “L” and “H”). If the needle
falls below the normal range, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and
check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct (and gauge reads no/low oil pressure),
shut down the engine immediately and contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
MINI MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Selectable features
Press and release the RESET stem to scroll trough the message center
functions. Select or reset the function by holding the RESET stem for
more than two seconds.
This menu displays the following control displays:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer A or B
• Autolamp (if equipped)
• Autolock/Autounlock (if equipped)
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in this chapter.
20

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Autolamp delay (if equipped)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
using RESET stem.
2. Press and hold the RESET stem
for two seconds to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30,
60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
Autolock/Autounlock (if equipped)
Autolock: This feature locks your doors when the vehicle is shifted out
of park.
Autounlock: This feature
automatically unlocks all vehicle
doors when the driver’s door is
opened within 10 minutes of the
ignition being turned off.
1. To disable/enable the
autolock/autounlock feature, select
this function using RESET stem.
2. Press and hold the RESET stem
for two seconds to turn it on or off
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the on position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status. The
system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of
system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.
Note: Refer to the SETUP menu in this section to select the Single or
Dual mode display in your message center.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.

Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
Note: The vehicle’s headlamps or
parklamps must be on to
perform/check light functions.
•System Check
•Oil Life
•Gauge Color
•Halo Light
•Halo Color
•Ambient Light (if equipped)
•Ambient Light Dim (if equipped)
•Ambient Color (if equipped)

•My Color 1, 2, 3
•Units (English/Metric)
•Autolamp (if equipped)
•Autolock (if equipped)
•Autounlock (if equipped)
•Language

System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either
an OK message or a warning message for two seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored. Note: Some systems show a message only
if a condition is present.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. OIL LIFE
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. ALL DOORS CLOSED
4. DRIVER DOOR
5. PASSENGER DOOR
6. TRUNK
7. SECURITY SYSTEM (if equipped)
8. BRAKE SYSTEM
9. FUEL LEVEL
Oil life
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
[approximately 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or six months] perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SETUP
control to display “OIL LIFE =
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW”.

2. Press and hold the RESET
control for two seconds and release.
Oil life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFE
SET TO 100%” is displayed.
3. While “OIL LIFE SET TO 100%”
is displayed, if a lower oil life start
value is desired, press and release the RESET control to reduce the start
value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10%.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or six
months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life
start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 108 days.
23

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Halo light
Turns the halo lighting around the gauges on or off.
1. To turn the halo lighting on or
off, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold RESET to turn
the feature on or off.
Ambient light
Turns the ambient lighting on or off. Ambient lighting provides accent
lighting in various locations such as footwell areas, cup holders and the
center console bin. The parklamps/headlamps must be on to use ambient
lighting.
1. To turn the ambient lighting on or
off, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold RESET to turn
the feature on or off.
Ambient light dim
Changes the intensity of the ambient lighting.
1. To change the intensity of the
ambient lighting, select this function
from the SETUP MENU.
2. Press RESET to choose: low,
medium, high or auto.
Gauge color, Ambient color, Halo color
Gauge color: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white
backlighting when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on,
you can select one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge
backlighting or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor威
feature.
Note: A gauge in a warning condition will be lit red when the headlamps
are on.
Ambient color: You can select one of the preset colors for ambient
lighting or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor威 feature.
Halo color: You can select one of the preset colors for halo lighting or
create up to three custom colors using the MyColor威 feature.
24

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Note: Headlamps or parklamps must be on to set up colors.
To choose colors for the gauges, halo color or ambient lighting do the
following:
1. Press SETUP to reach the GAUGE COLOR, AMBIENT COLOR, or
HALO COLOR menu.
2. Press RESET to scroll through the following color options:
• Ice Blue
• White
• Green
• Purple
• Blue
• Orange
• Red
• My color 1, 2, 3 (See Set my color following to save personalized color
combinations)
Set my color 1, 2, 3 (saving your own colors)
Apart from the preset colors, you can create your own color by adjusting
the levels of the three primary colors (Red, Green, and Blue) through
the MyColor威 feature to achieve any of 125 different combinations. You
can save up to three custom colors in MyColor威.
To enter the MyColor威 adjust mode, do the following (vehicle must be
stationary):
1. Press and hold RESET for three
seconds at the MyColor 1, 2 or 3
menu option to reach the MyColor威
adjust mode.
2. Press SETUP to scroll through
the Red (R), Green (G), Blue (B) and Exit options.
3. Press RESET to blend in more of the color being adjusted.
4. To save and exit, hold RESET for three seconds when prompted.
Pressing RESET for less than three seconds will cycle back through the
colors.
25

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press RESET to change from
English to Metric.
Autolamp
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press RESET to select the new
Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20,
30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press RESET to turn autolock on
or off.
Autounlock (if equipped)
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
1. To disable/enable the autounlock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold RESET to turn
the autounlock on or off.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.

2. Waiting four seconds or pressing
the RESET control cycles the
message center through each of the
language choices.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for two seconds to set the
language choice.

Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Trip A or B
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy (MPG)
• Timer
• Blank Display
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in this chapter.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
27

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km), to empty. If you reset this warning
message, it will return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles
(16 km) and 0 miles (0 km) miles to empty.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or
liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used (liters of
fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Instantaneous fuel economy (IFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your instantaneous
fuel economy. This will display your
fuel economy as a bar graph ranging
poor economy to
from
excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows
, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the trip elapsed drive
time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the timer.
Blank display
Select this function from the INFO control to turn your message center
display off.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing
RESET and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will not disappear until a condition is changed.
• They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset.
29

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
• They will not reappear until an ignition off-on cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warnings that can be reset:
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger side door
is not completely closed.
Warnings that return after 10 minutes:
OIL PRESSURE LOW — Displayed when the engine oil pressure is low.
If this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.
Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
information about adding engine oil. If the oil level is OK and this
warning persists, shut down the engine immediately and contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM — Displayed when the electrical system
is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes
on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Warnings that return after the ignition key is turned from off to
on:
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the braking system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
30

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
SECURITY EVENT OCCURRED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the active anti-theft system (if equipped) was activated since the prior
ignition cycle.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to
Brake/clutch fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door
is opened.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with
a unique audio system. If your
display shows six small circles in the
display, your audio system is a CD6
system (six disc changer). If not,
your system is a single CD system.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Setting the clock
To set the time, press CLOCK. The
display will read SET TIME. Use the
memory preset numbers (0–9) to
enter in the desired time–hours and minutes. The clock will then begin
from that time.
AM/FM Radio
/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the radio on/off. Turn the
knob to increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
TUNE: Turn the knob to go
up/down the frequency band in
individual increments.

DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then
select the desired radio frequency
(i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset
numbers (0–9).
SEEK
to
SEEK: Press
access the previous/next strong
radio station.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of
all strong radio stations.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): When
tuned to any station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns
and PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 30
stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and FM2.
33

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Saving presets automatically: Autoset allows you to set the strongest
local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset
stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO
SEEK
to turn
PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search to
initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press
another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.
The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing.
If there are fewer than 10 strong stations, the system will store the last
one in the remaining presets.
Note: In order to re-run the autoset features, you must first select
AUTO PRESET OFF and press OK. Then, select AUTO PRESET ON and
press OK.
RDS Radio
Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: CLASSIC,
COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the
SEEK
to switch RDS ON and OFF. When RDS is
display. Use
OFF, you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view
the station name or type.
CAT (Category) / FOLD
(Folder): This feature allows you
to select from various music
categories.
To change RDS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON/OFF
SEEK
to toggle RDS between
appears in the display. Use
ON/OFF. Press CAT. PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS
SEEK
to scroll
CATEGORY will appear in the display. Press
through all possible categories. When the desired category appears in the
SEEK
to find the next station playing that
display, press
selection or press SCAN for a brief sampling of all stations playing that
category of music.
34

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
CD/MP3 Player
CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If
a disc is already loaded into the
system, CD/MP3 play will begin
where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
LOAD:
For a single CD system– This
control is not operational. To load a
CD, simply insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.
For a CD6 system– Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT
SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. When
the display reads LOAD CD #, load the desired disc, label side up. If you
do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose for you.
Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to six discs– Press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD #. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system
will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Press the number preset buttons (1–6) to choose the disc you want to
play.
/
Play/Pause: Press to
play/pause a track when playing a
CD.

EJECT:
For a single CD system– press
EJECT to eject the CD.
For a CD6 system– press EJECT and select the desired CD slot by
pressing the corresponding memory preset number. The display will read
EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read
REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD, the
system will reload the disc.
To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold EJECT. The system will
eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
SEEK: Press
SEEK
to
access the previous/next track.
CAT (Category) / FOLD
(Folder):
In MP3 mode only– Press
CAT/FOLD and then
SEEK
to access the previous/next folder.
press
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of
all tracks on the current disc or
MP3 folder.
DIRECT:
In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The
display will read DIRECT TRACK
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the
memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that
track.
In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons
(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific
folder.
TEXT:
In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT
repeatedly to view Album (AL),
Folder (FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then
SEEK
to view the additional display text.
press
COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF
SEEK
to switch between ON/OFF.
appears in the display. Use
When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD
passages together for a more consistent listening level.
SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in
SEEK
to switch between ON/OFF. If you wish to
the display. Use
SEEK
to begin random
engage shuffle mode right away, press
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. The system will only shuffle the disc currently playing.
36

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS威 radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access
satellite radio mode, if equipped.
Press repeatedly to cycle through
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.
TUNE: Turn to go to the next /
previous available SIRIUS威 satellite
station.

DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter
the desired channel (i.e. 002) using
the memory preset buttons (0–9). If
you only enter one digit, press OK
and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,
the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may
cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is
entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system
will continue playing the current station.
SEEK: Press
SEEK
to seek
to the previous/next channel. If a
specific category is selected, (Jazz,
Rock, News, etc.),
press
SEEK
to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected
category. Press and hold
SEEK
to fast seek through the
previous/next channels.
SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief
sampling of all available SIRIUS威
satellite channels. If a specific
category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press SCAN for a brief
sampling of all available SIRIUS威 satellite channels within the selected
category.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There
are 30 available presets, 10 each for
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save
satellite channels in your memory presets, tune to the desired channel
then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.
37

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
TEXT: Press and release to display
the artist and song title. While in
TEXT MODE, press again to scroll
through the Artist (AR), Song (SO), Channel (CH) and Category (CA).
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the < / > indicator is active, press TEXT and then
press
SEEK
to view the additional display text.
CAT (Category) / FOLD
(Folder): Press to switch between
turning the most recently selected
satellite radio category on or off. The category icon (CAT) will illuminate
in the display when a specific category is selected (the icon will not
illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no category has ever been
selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.
Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a
satellite radio category.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press
MENU when satellite radio mode is
active to access. Press OK to enter
into the satellite radio menu. Press
SEEK
to cycle through the
following options:
• CATEGORY MENU- Press OK to enter category mode.
SEEK
to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS威
Press
channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the
desired category appears in the display. After a category is selected,
SEEK
to search for that specific category of channels
press
only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all
available SIRIUS威 categories and channels. Press OK to close and
return to the main menu.
• SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.
SEEK
to scroll through the following options:
Press
a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s
title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than
a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song
is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
38

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
SEEK
to cycle through the saved titles.
saved titles and press
When the song title appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
SEEK
to cycle through the saved songs. When
memory. Press
the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press
OK. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want
SEEK
to select either
to delete the currently listed song, press
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
option is to turn them off.
• CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel
SEEK
to scroll through the following
Lockout menu. Press the
options:
a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when
LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read
ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)
and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED
or UNLOCKED will be displayed.
Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to
lock/unlock when using this feature.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The
display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN
number and when the system accepts your entry it will display
ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will
save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.
c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL
CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter
your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the
display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.
d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display
will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the
PIN to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO DEFAULT
PIN will be displayed.
e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system
will exit back to the satellite radio menu.
Sound Adjustments
Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle
through the following features:
BASS: Press
SEEK
adjust the level of bass.
TREBLE: Press

SEEK

BALANCE: Press
SEEK
(L) and right (R) speakers.

to adjust the level of treble.
to adjust the audio between the left

SEEK
to adjust the audio between the back (B)
FADE: Press
and front (F) speakers.
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume
automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate
for road and wind noise.
The default setting is off.
SEEK
to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1–7:
Use
Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting) allows
the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
SEEK
to choose between
DSP MODE (if equipped): Press
STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO mode.
40

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Extra Features
AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through LINE (auxiliary audio
mode) and SYNC威 (if equipped).
For auxiliary jack location and further information on auxiliary audio
mode, refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, please refer to the SYNC威
information included with your vehicle for further information.
/
Play/Pause: Press this
control to play or pause the current
CD.
OK: Your vehicle may be equipped
with special phone and media
features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK.
For further information, refer to the SYNC威 information included with
your vehicle.
PHONE: If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, press to access SYNC
PHONE features. For further information, please refer to the SYNC威
information included with your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display will read NO
PHONE.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle is equipped with an
auxiliary input jack (AIJ) located in
the center console. The auxiliary
input jack provides a way to connect
your portable music player to the
in-vehicle audio system. This allows
the audio from a portable music
player to be played through the
vehicle speakers with high fidelity.
To achieve optimal performance,
please observe the following
instructions when attaching your
portable music device to the audio
system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system, refer to
Auxiliary input jack section in the
Audio features chapter of your
Navigation System supplement.

Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
42

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port inside your center console.
This feature allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks, and also to charge devices if
they support this feature. For
further information on this feature,
refer to Accessing and using your
USB port in the SYNC威 supplement
or Navigation System supplement.

LINE IN

GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
44

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
• Wipe discs from the center out.

Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.

.mp3 1
.mp3 2
2
3

.mp3 3
.mp3 4
.mp3 5

.mp3 6
.mp3 7

.doc
.ppt
.xls

In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS威 broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS威 satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna. Like AM/FM,
there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception
performance:
• Antenna Obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and any
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
47

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio service: SIRIUS威 satellite radio is a
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,
news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order
to receive SIRIUS威 service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS威 satellite radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player
and other SIRIUS威 features, please contact SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12-digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS威. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and the preset 1 control
simultaneously.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
ACQUIRING

SAT FAULT

Condition
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
Internal module or
system failure present.

Action Required
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.

If this message does not
clear within a short period
of time, or with an ignition
key cycle, your receiver may
have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL
Channel no longer
This previously available
available.
channel is no longer
available. Tune to another
channel. If the channel was
one of your presets, you
may choose another channel
for that preset button.
UNSUBSCRIBED
Subscription not
Contact SIRIUS威 at
available for this
1–888–539–7474 to
channel.
subscribe to the channel, or
tune to another channel.
NO TEXT
Artist information not
Artist information not
available.
available at this time on this
channel. The system is
working properly.
NO TEXT
Song title information
Song title information not
not available.
available at this time on this
channel. The system is
working properly.
NO TEXT
Category information
Category information not
not available.
available at this time on this
channel. The system is
working properly.
49

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO SIGNAL

Condition
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS威 satellite
or SIRIUS威 tower to
the vehicle antenna.

UPDATING

Update of channel
programming in
progress.
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威 satellite
radio.

CALL SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474

Action Required
You are in a location that is
blocking the SIRIUS威 signal
(i.e., tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage, etc).
The system is working
properly. When you move
into an open area, the signal
should return.
No action required. The
process could take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNC姞 (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC威 supplement or to the
SYNC威 section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
2. R Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information.
3.
Multifunction control: Press repeatedly to cycle through the
settings to choose:
•
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents and floor vents. The system will automatically provide outside
air to reduce window fogging.
•
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•

: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and de-mister vents.
•
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
51

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
5.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
any airflow mode except
(defrost). When the ignition switch is
turned off and back on, the climate system will return to the recirculated
air mode only if the A/C button LED is illuminated and the air
(panel) or
(panel/floor).
distribution selection is either
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button
again for normal A/C operation.
Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Press to control
7.
the passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
8. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the
vehicle.
9.

Fan speed adjustment: Turn to select the desired fan speed.

Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Press to control the
10.
driver seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
11.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
(defrost). Temperature and/or fan speed can also be
select
increased to improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
52

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position (automatic
transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance in MAX A/C mode:
1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
For maximum cooling performance in panel or panel/floor modes:
1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Select A/C and

(recirculated air) to provide colder airflow.

3. Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select

2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(NAVIGATION BASED – IF EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. CLIMATE: Press to control the climate control system through the
touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.
2. R Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
3. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
(defrost)
engages automatically in Max A/C,
(floor/defrost).
and
4. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger
temperature control to increase/decrease the air temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
54

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
5.
Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
6.
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A/C and may also
help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when Max A/C is selected or can
(defrost).
be engaged manually in any airflow mode except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except
Max A/C.
7. –

+ Fan speed control: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.

8. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
9. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature
for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
10.
heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
11.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.
When the power is turned back on, the system defaults to full automatic
control.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield
12.
defroster vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield
of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to
reduce window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous
air flow selection. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Temperature: Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the
screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of
the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when dual zone operation is disengaged. Press the up and down arrows
on the right side of the screen to increase/decrease the airflow
temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.
•
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•

: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and de-mister vents.
•
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
•

: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, and floor vents. The system will automatically provide outside
air to reduce window fogging.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main bezel.
Fan Speed: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.
Dual: Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger
temperature controls.
Max A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press Max A/C again for
normal operation.
VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE
Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the
Navigation Supplement for more information on using voice commands
with the climate control system.
56

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
(defrost). Temperature and/or fan speed can also be
select
increased to improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
(recirculated air) engaged.
system off or with
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and
idling for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run
the A/C in the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the
lowest setting and put the vehicle’s transmission in P (Park) to
continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in AUTO:
1. Press AUTO control.
2. Set to desired temperature.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in manual override
control
1. Choose

(panel), A/C, and MAX A/C controls.

2. Set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select

2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
57

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The LED
will illuminate.
The rear window defroster turns off automatically after 15 minutes, or
when the ignition is turned off. To manually turn off the defroster before
15 minutes have passed, press the control again.
The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which is located just in
front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the
concentration of airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the
air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration
system gives the following benefits to customers:
• Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle
concentration
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits
For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace
the cabin air filter, refer to your scheduled maintenance information.
For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an
authorized dealer.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the low beam headlamps
on.

Automatic instrumentation illumination
When the headlamps or parking lamps are switched on, a light sensor in
your vehicle monitors the outside lighting conditions and automatically
sets the instrument panel illumination to one of the following modes:
• If the headlamps and parking lamps are off, the vehicle will be in
daytime illumination mode.
• If the headlamps or parking lamps are on and daylight is detected, the
vehicle will be in daytime illumination mode.
• If the headlamps or parking lamps are on and nighttime conditions are
detected, the vehicle will be in nighttime illumination mode.
Note: The panel dimmer control works only in nighttime illumination
mode. It has no effect in daytime illumination mode. Also, selectable
features such as gauge color and halo color will not be available in
daytime illumination mode.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
.
control to
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control from the autolamp
position.
59

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change
the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming
procedure that follows:
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield
wipers are turned on, the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp
control in the autolamp position.
Autolamps - programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in
the autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp control to off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.
4. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.
Fog lamp control (if equipped)
The fog lamps can be turned on
when the ignition is in the on
position, the headlamp control is in
or
position and the
the
high beams are not on.
Pull the headlamp control towards
you to turn on the fog lamps. The
indicator light under the fog lamp
symbol will illuminate.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever toward you to deactivate.

OFF

Flash-to-pass
Pull toward you, to the first detent,
to activate and release to deactivate.
Note: Vehicles equipped with HID
headlamps will hear an audible click
when activating this feature.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output (vehicles equipped with
halogen headlamps) or turns the front fog lamps on (vehicles equipped
with HID headlamps).
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position,
• the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position and
• the parking brake must be disengaged.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
61

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps. Move the control
down, past detent, to turn off the
interior lights. Move the control to
the full downward position, to dim
the interior lights to their minimum. The instrument panel/switch lighting
remains lit.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is
marked by a 3 mm circle on the headlamp lens.
62

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
For vehicles with halogen headlamps:
On the wall or screen you will
observe a flat zone of high intensity
light located at the top of the right
hand portion of the beam pattern. If
the top edge of the high intensity
light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will
need to be adjusted.
For vehicles with HID headlamps:
There is a distinct cut-off (change
from light to dark) in the left
portion of the beam pattern. The
top edge of this cut-off should be
positioned two inches (50.8 mm)
below the horizontal reference line.

4. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp.
• Halogen headlamp (1)
• HID headlamp (2)
63

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
5. Then use a 7mm Allen wrench or a Phillips screwdriver to adjust the
headlamp up or down. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS
VEHICLE AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.

The flash rate of the turn signal indicator will speed up considerably if
any of the turn signal lamps are out.
Note: For sequential rear turn signal lamps, an outage of the inner most
of the three compartments will result in this rapid flash rate.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Map lamps
Press the controls on either side of
the lamp to turn the light on.

BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
64

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Headlamp (halogen)
* HID (high intensity discharge) headlamp
(if equipped)
Front park lamp, turn lamp (halogen)
Front park, turn lamp (HID)
Sidemarker (front/rear)

Trade Number
H13
D3S

3457 or 3457K
3457AK (amber)
194
9145–GT or H11–Pony
Fog lamp
(if equipped)
L1230R-3N and
Tail lamp, brake lamp, turn lamp (LED)
L3230R-4CX
* High-mount stoplamp (LED)
Non-replaceable LEDs
Backup lamp
912
License plate lamp
C5WL
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
65

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by
depressing the retainer clip and
pulling rearward.
3. Remove the bulb by rotating it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out.

WARNING: Handle a
halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not
touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the
headlamps are operated.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge” source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the
bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized
dealer.
66

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the
hood.

Halogen headlamp

HID headlamp
2. Remove the hex head screws attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield and remove to gain access to the front parking lamp/ turn
signal assembly.
3. Rotate the socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp
assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing front sidemarker bulb
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the hex head screws
attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield and remove to gain
access to the front sidemarker
assembly.

3. Rotate the socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp
assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of socket.

Replacing tail lamp/brake/rear turn signal lamps
See your authorized dealer for replacement LED assembly.
The tail lamp, the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp are located in the
tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace these lamps.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position, then open the
trunk.
2. Carefully remove the fasteners
around the lamp area and then
remove the interior trunk trim.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
3. Unbolt the three tail lamp
attachment nuts and remove the
lamp assembly.
4. Rotate the LED assembly
counterclockwise and remove it
from the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the LED assembly
from the electrical connector and
replace the LED assembly.
6. Install new LED assembly in
reverse order.
Replacing backup bulbs
The backup lamps are located in the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same
steps to replace either bulb.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position, then open the
trunk.
2. Carefully remove the fasteners
around the lamp area, then remove
the interior trunk trim.
3. Unbolt the three tail lamp
attachment nuts and remove the
lamp assembly.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing rear sidemarker lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position and locate the
sidemarker on the rear bumper
fascia.
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver
between the rear of the sidemarker
lens and the bumper fascia.
3. Push the screwdriver to the front
of the vehicle and then slide it towards you to pop out the lamp
assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (GT) (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the
hood.
2. Remove the sight shield by
loosening the fasteners with a
flathead screwdriver.
3. Remove the two underhood bolts
attaching the bumper cover next to
the grill and then pull the
cover/grille/fog lamp assembly
forward to access the fog lamp
bulbs.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pulling it straight off.
5. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (V6) (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the
hood.
2. Remove the hex head screws
attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield and remove to gain
access to the fog lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pulling
it straight off.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise
and remove from the lamp assembly.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
lens from the license plate lamp
assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out from the lamp assembly.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.

Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with Autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Push the lever down to unlock
the steering column. While the lever
is in the down position, tilt the
steering column to its desired
orientation.
2. While holding the steering
column, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)
The compass heading is displayed in the center integrated display (CID).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Turn ignition to the on position.

3 2

14
13

12
6

7 8 9 1011

3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
preset buttons together for
approximately five seconds until
ZONE XX appears in the CID.

4. Press and release the 7 and 9
radio preset buttons together,
repeatedly until ZONE XX changes
to the correct zone (1–15) in the
CID.
5. The direction will display after
the buttons are released. The zone
is now updated.

Compass calibration adjustment
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7
and 9 radio preset buttons together
for approximately 10 seconds until
CAL appears. Release the buttons.

3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CAL display changes to the
direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It
may take up to five circles to
complete calibration.
4. The compass is now calibrated.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle is equipped with a
variety of console features. These
include:
• Dual cupholders in front of
console (pull door open to
access)
• Lockable storage bin (use ignition
key to lock/unlock the console bin
and press the latch to open the
console)
• Auxiliary power point
• Coin holder slots
• Audio input jack
• USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
• On the instrument panel
• Inside the center console storage bin
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12VDC/180W/15A. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
76

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Press and pull the switches to open
and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Express-down (front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to open fully without
holding the control down. Press the
switch completely down to the
AUTO
AUTO
second detent and release quickly.
The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Express-up (front windows only)
Allows the driver and passenger’s
window to close fully without
holding the control up. Pull the
switch completely up to the second
detent and release quickly. The
window will close fully. Momentarily
press the switch to any position to
stop the window operation
Restoring the express-up functionality (front windows only)
Under low battery power conditions, express-up only functionality may
be lost. To reset this function after restoring full battery power, pull the
switch to the express-up position, hold the switch until the glass reaches
the stall position and continue to hold for two seconds. Press the window
switch down and operate the window to the full down position.
Express-up will now be functional. Perform express-up re-calibration
with door closed only. Calibrating with door open will cause the
window to continuously bounce back.
Bounce-back (front windows only)
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the
window is moving upward, the window will automatically move down and
stop at a prescribed position.
77

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Bounce-back override (front windows only)
To override bounce-back, within two seconds after reaching bounce-back
position, if the switch is moved from the neutral to the express-up
position the window will travel up with no bounce-back protection.
If the switch is released before the window reaches fully closed position,
the window will stop. For example: bounce-back override can be used to
overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals.
Short drop glass (front windows only)
In order to improve door efforts and sealing, your vehicle is equipped
with short drop glass. This feature lowers the glass when either door is
opened. The glass returns to its closed position when the door is closed.
Proper operation of the short drop glass requires that the windows be
calibrated. Though your windows will have been calibrated before
your vehicle is delivered to you, it is possible for the windows to
lose calibration. If a window loses its calibration, your short drop
feature will lower the window, but will not raise it again when the door is
closed. To re-calibrate the window, pull the switch up to raise the
window until it completes its travel and hold the switch up for two
seconds. Another possible effect of lost calibration is that the feature
may not lower the window. To re-calibrate the window in this case, lower
the window until it completes its travel and hold the switch down for
two seconds. Immediately after releasing the window switch, pull the
switch up to raise the window until it completes its travel and hold the
switch up for two seconds. Perform short drop re-calibration with
doors closed only. Re-calibrating with doors open will cause the
window to continuously bounce back.
Rear power windows (convertible only)
The rear quarter windows are operated by a single window switch
located at the driver door window controls. Press and pull the window
switch to open and close the windows.
• Press down and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up and hold the switch to close.
Rear power windows manual override (convertible only)
The rear quarter window switch will not operate under the following
conditions:
• Convertible top is moving
• Convertible top is not completely up or down
78

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
In the event that the rear quarter window switch does not operate when
the convertible top is completely up or down, the rear quarter windows
can be manually raised up.
The following procedure must be performed within two minutes:
1. Turn the ignition key to the off position, then turn back to the on
position.
2. Press the rear window switch down three times.
3. Turn the ignition key to the off position, then turn back to the on
position.
4. Pull and hold the rear window switch up and hold for three seconds,
the rear windows will begin to start moving up.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches, convertible top (if equipped)
and radio may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the off position or until either front door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has
an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change
from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
79

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, a video image will be
displayed in the mirror or the navigation system display (if equipped)
when the vehicle is put in R (Reverse). As you shift into any other gear
from R (Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn
off. Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering
wheel.
Base controls
OFF

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Optional controls

1. Press the ON control and release it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
Base controls
RES

SET

Optional controls

3. Press the SET (+) control and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator

light on the instrument cluster will turn on.

Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Tap the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if equipped)
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
81

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Base controls
RES

SET

Optional controls

Press the RES / RESUME control and release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
Base controls
RES

SET

Optional controls

There are two ways to set a higher speed:
• Press and hold the SET (+) control until you get to the desired speed,
then release the control. You can also use the SET (+) control to
operate the Tap-Up function. Press and release this control to increase
the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET (+) control.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Reducing speed while using speed control
Base controls
RES

SET

Optional controls

There are two ways to reduce a set speed:
• Press and hold the SET (-) control until you get to the desired speed,
then release the control. You can also use the SET (-) control to
operate the Tap-Down function. Press and release this control to
decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached and
press the SET (+) control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
Base controls
OFF

Optional controls

• Press the OFF control.
• Turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
83

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
With navigation system (if
equipped)
to use the voice
• Press
command features.
For further information on using
voice commands with the
navigation system, refer to the
Navigation System supplement.
• Press
to select the entertainment playing media (radio, CD, line in,
etc.).
• Press – VOL + to adjust the volume in any mode.
• Press
to activate phone mode.
Refer to the Navigation System supplement for more information on
using phone features.
• Press

to change radio stations/CD tracks.

Refer to the Navigation System supplement for more information on
using this feature.
With SYNC威 system (if
equipped)
• Press
to use the voice
command features.
For further information on using
voice commands with the SYNC威
system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
• Press
to select the entertainment playing media (radio, CD, line in,
etc.).
• Press – VOL + to adjust the volume in any mode.
• Press

to activate phone mode.

Refer to the SYNC威 supplement for more information on using phone
features.
• Press OK to confirm selections various audio and SYNC威 selections.
For further information on the SYNC威 system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
84

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
• Press

to change radio stations/CD tracks.

CONVERTIBLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles stored in the convertible
top stowage compartment may break the rear glass window when the top
is lowered.
Lowering the convertible top
The convertible top can be lowered with the side windows down. The
windows will automatically lower when lowering or raising the top.
The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is traveling
under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Lowering the convertible top when the top material is wet may
cause mold or mildew.
To lower the convertible top:
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop. Key must be in the on position. It is
recommended that the vehicle’s engine is running when lowering the top
to prevent draining the battery.
2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment behind the rear seat
to be sure it is empty and ready to receive the top. Check the
convertible top outer surface to be sure it is free of leaves and debris.
The latch handles must be pulled
downward fully to allow the
latch to fully rotate into the
open position.
3. Unclamp the top from the
windshield header by pulling each
latch handle down and then rotating
the latch to the rear until it clears
the header.
Note: If the top has not been lowered for some time and sticks to the
windshield header, push the front of the top up slightly with your hand
to loosen it.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
4. Press the convertible top switch
on the overhead console and hold
until the windows are completely
down and the top is completely
stored.

Installation of the boot (if equipped)
Be sure the boot is secure on the vehicle before driving.

3
1. Install the boot on the vehicle by hooking the boot retaining clips on
the back panel.
2. Install the boot on the right side tucking in the front part of the boot
in the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.
3. Install the boot on the left side tucking in the front part of the boot in
the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.
86

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
4. Tuck the boot corners behind the shoulder belts.
5. Secure the boot straps on the rear seat hooks behind the rear seat.
Note: Improper installation can result in loss and/or damage of
the boot while driving.
WARNING: Always secure the retaining clips and boot straps on
the vehicle or the boot may come loose while driving.
To remove, unhook the boot straps from the rear seat hooks and push
the boot down slightly unhooking the boot retaining clips from the
vehicle and lift off.
Storing the boot

1. Position the boot right-side up and fold each side of the boot inward.

2. Turn the boot upside down and fold the left side of the boot inward.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls

3. Fold the right side inward and secure the boot with the strap.
Stow the boot in the trunk.
Raising the convertible top
The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is traveling
under 3 mph (5 km/h).
To raise the convertible top:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Key must be in the on position.
It is recommended that the vehicle’s engine is running when raising the
top to prevent draining the battery.
2. Press the convertible top switch,
holding it until the windows lower
completely and the top unfolds and
moves forward toward the
windshield header.
3. You can release the convertible
top switch to open both latch
handles before the top meets the
windshield header. Note: Make sure
the latch handles are pulled down
fully for hand clearance and are
swung to the fully open position.
Note: If the top has been in the down position for an extended period or
if the temperature is low, the top material may shrink a small amount.
Pull down on the latch handles and at the center grip in the header to
fasten the top.
4. Continue to use the convertible top switch to raise the top until it has
reached the fully closed position flush to the header.
Note: The two pins under the forward edge of the top should seat
themselves in the matching holes in the header.
88

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Note: The latch handles must be pulled downwards fully to allow the
latch to fully rotate into the closed position.
5. Secure the driver’s side latch first,
then secure the passenger side. Pull
down firmly on the latch handles
before rotating them into the
windshield header until they reach
the full forward position. Pull down
on the latch handles and at the
center grip in the header to fasten
the top. Press the latch handles up
into the stowed position once the
latch is rotated into the full forward
position.
6. Raise the rear windows first and then raise the front windows.
ROLLER BLIND SUN SHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with a glass roof, the roller blind sun shade
will cover the glass roof inside your vehicle.
Use the center-mounted cup handle
to slide the shade open or closed.

INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
The remote trunk release button is
located on the instrument panel.
Press the button to unlatch the
trunk.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Interior trunk control lockout (convertible vehicles only)
This feature helps prevent unauthorized access to the trunk when the
convertible top is open, by disabling the interior trunk control.
This is useful when you want to leave the convertible top open, but still
prevent access to the trunk.
To operate this feature (the vehicle must be off and accessory power
delay not active):
Lock the vehicle using the integrated keyhead transmitter or the power
door lock switch. The interior trunk control will now be disabled.
To enable the interior trunk control:
• use the integrated keyhead transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
• or turn the ignition on.
The interior trunk control will now work normally.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The key blade
functions as a programmed key
which starts the vehicle and
unlocks/locks all the doors. The
transmitter portion functions as the
remote entry transmitter.

Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your authorized dealer
supplied IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your authorized
dealer. Standard SecuriLock威 keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.

POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock controls are located on the driver and front
passenger door panels.
91

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Press the
doors.

control to unlock all

Press the
doors.

control to lock all

Locking and unlocking with keys
Your vehicle’s keys are designed to lock and unlock the driver’s door, as
well as open the trunk.
• The driver’s door is unlocked when the key is inserted in the driver
door key cylinder and turned to the unlock position. The driver’s door
is locked when the key is inserted in the driver door key cylinder and
turned to the lock position.
Note: If the vehicle is not equipped with active anti-theft system, locking
the driver door with the key does not lock the passenger door. Use the
power door lock control or manually lock the passenger door to ensure
the vehicle is properly secured.
Smart locks
This feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if
your key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key or
using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter.
Autolock (if equipped)
The autolock feature will automatically lock all vehicle doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, (for manual
transmission, the parking brake should not be engaged) and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
92

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature enabled. There are three
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer, or
• performing the power door lock control procedure, or
• performing the message center procedure. Refer to Message center in
the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the active anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the off
position, and all vehicle doors are closed.
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete Steps 1-5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
Note: All doors must be closed and remain closed throughout the
configuration process.
1. The ignition must be off to begin
sequence.
2. Turn the ignition to the on
position.
3. Press the power door unlock
control three times.
4. Turn the ignition from the on to
the off position.
5. Press the power door unlock control three times.
6. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp.
7. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
93

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
8. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Autounlock (if equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned to the off or accessory position.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock feature activated. There are
three methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer, or
• by using the power door unlock/lock sequence,
• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
94

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.

WARNING: Keep vehicle
doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep
keys and remote transmitters out
of a child’s reach. Unsupervised
children could lock themselves in
the trunk and risk injury. Children
should be taught not to play in
vehicles.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle
doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle
doors.
• remotely open the trunk.
• activate the personal alarm.
• arm and disarm the active
anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry
feature.

The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the key in the off position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL integrated keyhead transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors/two-stage unlock
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
and release again within five seconds to unlock the
2. Press
passenger door.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
to the on position.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on using the dimmer control or
• any door is open.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 30 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the off position.
Two-stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
and
controls on the IKT for four seconds (disabling
pressing the
97

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously). The
turn lamps will flash twice to indicate that two-stage unlock was enabled
or disabled.
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The turn signal lamps will
illuminate. Note: The interior lamps will turn off (unless the dome lamp
control is in the full-up position), and the turn signal lamps will flash if
all doors, trunk and hood (if equipped with active anti-theft system) are
closed. If the vehicle is not equipped with the active anti-theft system,
the turn signal lamps will flash if all doors, trunk and hood are closed.
The parking lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors, trunk and hood are closed. Note: The doors will lock again,
the horn will chirp once and the turn signal lamps will flash once more.
If any of the doors, trunk or hood (if equipped with active anti-theft
system) are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and
the turn signal lamps will not flash. If the vehicle is not equipped with
the active anti-theft system, the horn will make two quick chirps and the
turn signal lamps will not flash if either door or the trunk are not closed.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn signal
Press
and interior lamps will flash for a maximum of approximately three
again or turn the ignition to the accessory or on
minutes. Press
position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time-out in approximately
three minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off
position.
Opening the trunk
Press

twice to open the trunk.

• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
98

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
The remote entry system allows you to open the trunk while the ignition
is in any position. However, if the ignition is in the on position and the
vehicle is in motion, the trunk will not open if the vehicle is moving
3 mph (5 km/h) or faster.
In the event of battery failure, you
can open the trunk on the
convertible by using your master
key in the key cylinder between
the seat cushion located in the
back seat on the driver’s side.

Replacing the battery
The integrated keyhead transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
IKT near the key ring in order to
remove the battery cover.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
2. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the instructions inside the IKT for
the correct orientation of the
battery. Press the battery down to
ensure that the battery is fully
seated in the battery housing cavity.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto
the key.
99

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. The IKT should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your integrated keyhead transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new integrated keyhead transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and turn signal lamps illuminate when the integrated
keyhead transmitter is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the integrated keyhead transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamp and the turn signal lamps will
illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.

100

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the off position and a door is left open, and
in 30 minutes if the dome lamp control is left on and the ignition has
been turned to the off position. The battery saver will also shut off the
trunk lamps in 30 minutes if the trunk is left open.
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT)
programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of
coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded integrated keyhead transmitters;
additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock威 keys without remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired. The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your
vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself. Refer to Programming
spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

101

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is in the off
position, the indicator will flash
once every two seconds to
indicate the SecuriLock威 system
is functioning as a theft
deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock威 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no
electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t
start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful
contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator
still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the
vehicle.
• The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
• If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or
flashes rapidly, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Replacement integrated keyhead transmitters (IKT) and coded keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead
transmitters (IKTs). The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
102

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be IKTs
with remote entry functionality.
If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock威 coded keys are lost or stolen and
you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from
your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock威 coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use integrated keyhead transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock威 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the
entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)
position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position
for at least three seconds, but no
more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
103

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to
the 1 (off) position, insert the second previously coded key into the
ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least three seconds, but no more
than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position and remove the second
previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to
the 1 (off) position and removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the
ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
integrated keyhead transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait 20 seconds and
then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
ACTIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The active anti-theft system is designed to warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle and is also designed to help prevent
the unwanted towing of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is locked and armed, the active anti-theft system
monitors the following:
• Doors
• Hood
• Trunk
• Movement inside the vehicle
104

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
• Change in vehicle inclination
Note: The active anti-theft system includes a motion detection system
which monitors the passenger cabin and a vehicle incline sensor which
detects changes in vehicle attitude.
The interior motion detection and vehicle incline sensing systems
will operate only when the vehicle is locked using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or when using the power door lock
control with the accompanying door open and all doors then
become closed. For convertible vehicles, the convertible top must
be in the fully closed and latched position for the interior motion
sensing system to arm. If you lock the vehicle using the key in the
driver door key cylinder, the system will monitor the doors,
trunk, and hood but the interior motion sensing and vehicle
incline sensing will not arm.
Do not arm the interior motion detection system if movement within the
vehicle is likely to occur. Additionally, do not arm the vehicle incline
sensing system when the vehicle is in transport.
For proper operation of the interior motion detection system, ensure all
windows are closed prior to arming the system. This will help prevent
accidental alarm activation due to external influences and ensure proper
interior motion detection. Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system will not arm if either door or the trunk is ajar.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL integrated keyhead transmitters are brought to the
authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, the active anti-theft system is designed to notify you of an
unauthorized entry. When unauthorized entry or towing occurs, the
system will flash the turn signal lamps and interior lamps and will sound
the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Any
of the following actions will arm the alarm system:
• Press the
control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your
integrated keyhead transmitter.
• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or
passenger door is open and then becomes closed.
• Lock the driver door with the key in the key lock cylinder (this will
not however arm the interior motion or vehicle incline sensing
systems).
105

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the
20 second countdown. If any closure is not properly closed the turn
signal lamps will not flash and that closure will not be armed.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of
your integrated keyhead transmitter.
• Turn ignition to the on position with a valid programmed SecuriLock威
key or integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT).
• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
your IKT. This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still be armed.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Note: Unlocking the trunk inhibits the motion sensing system but the
system continues to monitor the doors, hood and vehicle incline. Once
the trunk becomes closed the motion sensing system will rearm.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the remote
entry transmitter portion of your IKT or key in driver door cylinder.
• The ignition is turned to the on position with an invalid
unprogrammed SecuriLock威 key or IKT.
• The vehicle is towed/inclined.
• Motion is detected in the interior passenger compartment.

106

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of:
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).

107

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.

3. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.

Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.

108

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.

2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button and
the unlock/remove button, then pull
up on the head restraint.

To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.

109

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Adjusting the manual seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.

Pull lever up to adjust the angle of
the seatback.

110

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Four-way seat adjust (driver side only)
Pump the handle upwards to raise
the cushion and pump downward to
lower the cushion to the desired
location.

Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located
on the top of the driver’s seat side
shield.
Press one side of the control to
increase lower back firmness.
Press the other side of the control
to decrease lower back firmness.

Adjusting the power seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
111

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer
to Front passenger sensing system section for additional details.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
The power seat control is located on
the outboard side of the seat
(illustration shows the driver’s seat).

Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.

112

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Move the switch in the direction of
the arrows to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.

Press the switch in the direction of
the arrows to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.

Heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seat control is located in the lower center of the instrument
panel.

113

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the heated seats:
• Press control to activate.
• Press again to deactivate.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
Rear seat entry/exit
Use the seatback release to fold the
back of the front seat forward for
rear seat access. This release handle
is located on the upper back of the
front seat. The seatback locks
automatically when returned to the
normal position.

Use the recliner handle to return
the seatback to the desired position.

REAR SEATS
2nd seat/split-folding rear seat
One or both rear seatbacks (coupe only) can be folded down to provide
additional cargo space.

114

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
To lower the seatback(s) from
inside the vehicle, be sure the head
restraint is in the upright position,
pull the strap to release the
seatback and then fold the seatback
down.

When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into
place. Pull down on the seatback to ensure that it has latched.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Driver and front passenger side airbags.
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp.
115

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and conditions. A
collection of crash sensors provides information to the Restraints Control
Module (RCM). During a crash, the RCM may activate the safety belt
pretensioners and/or either none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage
airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
116

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats
and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants
are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are
much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in
the front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and side airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent
unnecessary replacement of airbag(s) after a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraints (SRS) section of this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
117

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, front
passenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In
addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the
instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or
more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
118

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
119

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
The presenter arm (available on the coupe only) is intended to improve
access to the safety belt and to allow access to the rear seat.
Rotate the presenter arm toward the
front of the vehicle until it locks
into place. This allows easier access
to the front safety belt for the front
seat occupant.
To access the second row seats,
rotate the arm back to its original
position against the trim panel.

1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

120

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a
seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The
LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the
center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.
Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk
of injury or death in the event of a collision.

Energy management feature
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to
help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no
“automatic locking retractor” feature) must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”
feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer.
121

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
The front and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap
and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat safety belts have
two types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed
(except a booster) in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position.
Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or
Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.

122

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety
belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and
rear outboard safety belt systems must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”
feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
123

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags, side airbags, and safety belt pretensioners.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

124

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...

Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.

The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime will remain off.

Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.

125

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...

126

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.

The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.

Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare
events”

“I’m not going far”
“Belts are
uncomfortable”

“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t
work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my
clothes”
“The people I’m with
don’t wear belts”
“I have an airbag”

“I’d rather be thrown
clear”

Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The more
we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare”
events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us
will be seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles
(40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try
different positions for the safety belt upper
anchorage and seatback which should be as
upright as possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident. Belt-Minder威
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle
up.
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce
risk of death to front seat occupants by
45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when no
other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do much
more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly
if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times
more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE
people. Children and younger brothers/sisters
imitate behavior they see.
Airbags offer greater protection when used
with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not
designed to inflate in rear and side crashes
or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are ejected
are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety
belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK
OUR CRASH”.
127

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note:The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The gearshift is in neutral (manual transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the off position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.

128

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately one
minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state. Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by
three seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

129

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
130

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.

131

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains a
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the airbag sensors to close
an electrical circuit that initiates
airbag inflation. The fact that the
airbags did not inflate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not sufficient
enough to cause activation. Airbags
are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags
132

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
•
•
•
•
•
•

one or more impact and safing sensors
a readiness light and tone
a diagnostic module
and the electrical wiring which connects the components
front safety belt pretensioner
front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
133

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side
airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located on the front edge of the map lamps.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
134

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant

Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit
Lit

Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult
Unlit

Passenger Airbag
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

Enabled

WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
135

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Objects

Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Unlit

Passenger Airbag

Small (i.e. three-ring
Disabled
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
Lit
Disabled
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
Lit
Disabled
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
136

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is
no longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this owner’s guide.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
137

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag (airbag) with a
gas generator concealed behind
the outboard bolster of the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to
allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located under
the outboard side of the front
seats, attached to the floor.
Side airbags, in combination with
safety belts, can help reduce the
risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
138

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
to occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to initiate airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer . If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Warning lights and
chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance
of the airbag is not required.

139

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威) or
the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
See authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.

140

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.

141

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
Use a child safety
toddlers less (generally age four or younger) seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Use a belt-positioning
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
booster seat.
children longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, are greater than age four (4)
and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer)
Use a vehicle safety
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
children longer properly fit in a
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least across the hips,
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or shoulder belt
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb centered across the
shoulder and chest,
(45 kg) if recommended by child
and seatback upright.
restraint manufacturer)
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
142

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Restraint
Type

Rear
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat

Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Child anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
Weight and
only)
top
(lower
top
tether anchors
tether
anchor and top
anchor)
tether
anchor)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
X
(21 kg)
Over
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)

WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.

143

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
144

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
145

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
146

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

147

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
148

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch (2.5 cm)
of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching child
safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information.

149

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seat back,
below the locator symbols on the
seat back. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching
child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of
the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a
seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The
LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the
center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.
Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk
of injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
150

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats and below the rear window behind the
speakers (coupe) or rearward of the seatback in the convertible top sling
(convertible).
The tether anchors in your vehicle are either located under a cover
marked with the child tether anchor symbol (shown with title) or are
under a tag marked with the child tether anchor symbol in the
convertible top sling.

151

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed, using either the safety
belt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
For Coupe only:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.

152

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Open the tether anchor cover.

4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly
increases.

For Convertible only:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
153

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The tether anchors on the
convertible are located rearward of
the seatback in the convertible top
sling.
Note: For easier access, attach the
tether with the convertible top up.

Note: The attachments for the
convertible boot located on the back
of the head restraints are not tether
anchors.

154

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Access tether anchors located
behind the seatback under the vinyl
tag marked with the child tether
anchor symbol.

3. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.

4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
155

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).

156

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across
the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.

157

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

158

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
159

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
160

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
161

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
162

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ⬙blowout⬙, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
163

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.

164

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

165

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

166

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
167

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
168

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four-wheel drive
(4WD)/All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
169

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
170

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
171

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

172

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

173

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.

174

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
175

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to
the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
176

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire Pressure Possible
Customer Action Required
Warning Light
cause
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to
under-inflated ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in
use
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly inflated
malfunction
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

177

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Light

Possible
cause
Spare tire in
use

TPMS
malfunction

Customer Action Required
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat,
repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
178

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
The tires on your vehicle may have all weather treads to provide traction
in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the
law requires them.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Chains may damage aluminum wheels.
• Use only SAE Class S chains with P215/60R17 tires on the rear of the
vehicle only.
• Do not use tire chains with size P235/50R18 or 245/45R19 tires. Use of
SAE Class S chains or other chain types may damage your vehicle.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
179

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
SUMMER TIRES
Your Ford vehicle may be equipped with summer tires to provide
superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have
the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side
wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as
All-season or Snow tires, Ford does not recommend using summer tires
when temperatures are below 40°F (5°C) or in snow / ice conditions. If
you must drive in those conditions, Ford recommends using Mud & Snow
(M+S or M/S), All-season or Snow tires.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.

180

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.

181

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
182

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

183

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.

184

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

185

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) (12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
186

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 1,000 lb (454 kg) gross
trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 100 lb (45 kg). Do not tow
a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles (800 km).
Do not tow with the Shelby GT500; it is not rated to tow a trailer.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components
carefully after towing.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper; use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
187

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your
vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and
monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching
wiring to the vehicle bulb. may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps
or cause them not to function properly.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for proper
instructions and equipment for hooking-up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift out of D (Overdrive) into D (Overdrive cancelled) or a lower
gear (3, 2, or 1) when towing up or down steep hills. This will
188

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• Practice turning, stopping and backing-up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or neutral (manual transmissions).
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
189

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off — locks the automatic
transmission gearshift lever and
allows key removal.
Note: The ignition key cannot be
removed from the ignition unless
the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park).
2. Accessory — allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. On — all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. Start — cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
190

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).

191

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.

If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Push the clutch pedal to the floor

3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).

Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.

192

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start). If there
is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely.
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts.

Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to off, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails
to start, press and hold the accelerator to the floor and try again; this
will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
193

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug/engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
194

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your
factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;
however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three
hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will
not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional
electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking; any
pulsation or mechanical noise you may feel or hear is normal.

195

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), pull
the parking brake handle up as far
as possible.

The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.

!
P
BRAKE

To release, press and hold the button (2), pull the handle up slightly,
then push the handle down.

196

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ADVANCETRAC姞 STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac威 system. The
AdvanceTrac威 system provides the following stability enhancement
features for certain driving situations:
• Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac威 sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. If your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
197

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威 system, the stability control light and the stability
control off light will illuminate steadily. If the stability control light and
the stability control off light illuminate steadily, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the system serviced
immediately. Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
The AdvanceTrac威 system automatically enables each time the engine is
started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威 system (TCS and ESC) are
active and monitor the vehicle from start-up. However, the system will
only intervene if the driving situation requires it.
The AdvanceTrac威 system includes
a stability control button on the
center console, a stability control
light and a stability control off light
in the instrument cluster. Both the
stability control light and the
stability control off light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate
temporarily during start-up as part of a normal system self-check. The
stability control light may illuminate (flash) during certain driving
situations which cause the AdvanceTrac威 system to operate. If the
stability control light and the stability control off light illuminate steadily,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the system
serviced immediately. If equipped with a message center, the vehicle will
also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac威 system.
When AdvanceTrac威 performs a normal system self-check, some drivers
may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a rumble, grunting, or
grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威 you may experience
the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The stability control light will flash.
• A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
198

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem, engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
During TCS events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, the TCS will use only engine
power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from
over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain
all features. Anti-lock braking, and ESC are not affected by this condition
and will continue to function during the cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威
section below.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the TCS off. This may allow excess wheel spin to
“dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful “rocking” maneuver.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
199

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
Switching off AdvanceTrac威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 system may be
beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This will restore full
engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle.
The AdvanceTrac威 button can be
used to enable unique
AdvanceTrac威 modes.
Full features of the AdvanceTrac威
system can be restored by pressing
the stability control button again or
by turning off and restarting the
engine.
When features of the AdvanceTrac威
system are off, the stability control
off light will illuminate steadily.
Pressing the stability control button
again will turn off the stability
control off light.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function; however, ESC is disabled.

200

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving

Control
switch functions

AdvanceTrac威 Features
Message
“Sliding
Center
car off”
Mode
Display (if
icon
equipped)

Default at
start-up

Turns on
during
bulb
check

Control
switch
Traction conpressed once
trol OFF
momentarily
Control
switch
pressed twice Sport Mode
rapidly,
(if equipped)
brakes applied and no
throttle apply
Control
switch
pressed and
held for more
than five secAdvanceonds, vehicle
Trac威 Disspeed =
abled
0 mph
(0 km/h),
brakes applied
Control
switch
Advancepressed again Trac威 fully
after deactienabled
vation

ESC

TCS

Enabled

TRACTION
CONTROL
OFF

Enabled

Disabled

ADVANCE
TRAC
SPORT
MODE

Enabled

ADVANCE
TRAC OFF

Disabled

Off

ADVANCE
TRAC ON

Enabled

AdvanceTrac威 Sport Mode (if equipped)
The AdvanceTrac威 system provides an available sport mode on some
models. This can be selected utilizing the stability off button as shown in
the table above.
201

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Sport mode is not intended for use on public roadways as this mode
provides less AdvanceTrac威 system intervention than when the default
ESC and traction control systems are on. Sport mode will allow more
spirited driving while the AdvanceTrac威 system is still enabled.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• An improperly inflated tire
• Uneven tire wear
• Loose or worn suspension components
• Loose or worn steering components
• Improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK™ AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok™ axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
Traction-Lok™ rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
202

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver or
similar tool, remove the cap.
3. Locate the access hole at the
front of the area under the cover.
4. Insert the screwdriver or similar
tool into the hole and press and
hold the lever forward while pulling
the gearshift lever out of the P
(Park) position and into the N
(Neutral) position.
5. Reinstall the cap.
6. Start the vehicle.

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
203

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the system serviced immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy.
This Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy offers the optimal
transmission operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has
been disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will
need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to
reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been
disconnected. The Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy allows the
transmission to relearn these operating parameters. This learning process
could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this
learning process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning
process, normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
204

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through five.
D (Drive) without Overdrive
D (Drive) with Overdrive can be
deactivated by pressing the
transmission control switch on the
right side of the shift handle.
• This position allows for all
forward gears except Overdrive.

• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
O/D
• Provides engine braking.
OFF
• Use when driving conditions
cause excessive shifting from O/D to other gears. Examples: heavy city
traffic where continuous shifting in and out of overdrive occurs, hilly
terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing and when engine braking is
required.
• To return to Overdrive mode, press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• Overdrive mode is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.

205

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
3 (Third)
This position allows for third gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• To return to D (Drive) without Overdrive, move the transmission shift
lever into the D (Drive) position.
• Selecting 3 (Third) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to third gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to D (Drive) without Overdrive or 3 (Third), move the
transmission shift lever into the D (Drive) or 3 (Third) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
This position allows for first gear only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Will not downshift into first gear at high speeds; will cause the
transmission to downshift to a lower gear, then allows for first gear
when the vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in Overdrive or Drive.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
206

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the clutch
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
fully set.
2. Press and hold the clutch pedal
to the floor, then put the gearshift
lever in the neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move
the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then
slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal
must be fully pressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
positioned so it doesn’t interfere
with the full extension of the clutch
pedal.
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission
components or damage the transmission.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
hill. These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and
could nullify a clutch warranty claim.

207

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Recommended shift speeds
Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage the clutch.
Upshift according to the following chart:

1
2
3
4

2
3
4
5

Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
11 mph (18 km/h)
19 mph (31 km/h)
30 mph (48 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)

Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at
a complete stop before you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so
may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving
it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally
being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.

208

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera system,
located on the trunk, provides a
video image which appears in the
rearview mirror or on the navigation
screen (if equipped), of the area
behind the vehicle. It adds
assistance to the driver while
reversing or reverse parking the
vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display in the rearview mirror or on the navigation screen (if
equipped). The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the
vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as
they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones.
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle.
Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror:
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.
Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen:
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed
reaches 5 mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or
until any navigation radio button is pressed.
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera
delay feature to on or off. Refer to the Navigation System supplement
for more information.
209

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
The camera lens for the camera is located on the trunk. Keep the lens
clean so that the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the trunk open.

If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
210

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

211

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
212

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1-877-294-2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call
1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original
receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1-800-665-2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher control is located
on the center console next to the
gearshift lever. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
213

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH

FUEL
RESET

This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the driver’s footwell, by
the hood release.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pressing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition on.
5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to off.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.

Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.

214

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating

Mini
fuses

Standard
fuses

Maxi
fuses

2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A

Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural

Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located in the lower passenger side area behind the
kick panel. Open the trim panel door and remove the fuse cover to
access the fuses.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided to the left of the
fuses and relays.

215

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4

Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
15A
30A

10A

6
7
8
9
10

20A
10A
10A
15A
15A

216

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Protected Circuits
Driver rear window (convertible only)
Brake On/Off (BOO) power
SYNC威
Passenger rear window
(convertible only)
Brake transmission shift interlock
(BTSI)
Turn signals, Hazard flashers
Left low beam headlamp
Right low beam headlamp
Courtesy lamps
Switch illumination

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
11
12
13
14

Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
7.5A
5A
10A

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

10A
15A
20A
20A
25A
15A
15A
15A
15A
20A
10A
10A
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
10A
10A
5A

10A

36
37
38

5A
10A
20A

Protected Circuits
Security module
Power mirrors
Not used (Spare)
Center information display, Electronic
finish panel, GPS
Climate control
Not used (Spare)
Power door locks
Not used (Spare)
Navigation amp
Diagnostic connector
Fog lamps
Park lamps, License lamps
High beam headlamps
Horn
Demand lighting (battery saver)
Cluster (battery)
Ignition switch feed
Audio mute (Start)
Camera (Run/Start)
Not used (Spare)
Restraints control module (RCM)
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
Electronic stability control, Steering
angle
Auxiliary body module (ABM)
Run/Start
Passive anti-theft system (PATS)
Not used (Spare)
Not used (Spare)
217

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
39
40
41

Fuse Amp
Rating
20A
20A
15A

42
43
44
45
46

10A
10A
10A
5A
7.5A

30A Circuit
Breaker
—

Protected Circuits
Radio/Navigation
Not used (Spare)
Accessory delay (windows, automatic
dimming rear view mirror [including
microphone and compass] and door
switch III)
Not used (Spare)
Heated seat relay coils
Not used (Spare)
Wiper relay and module, Blower relay
Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator (PADI), Occupant
classification sensor (OCS)
Not used (Spare)
Accessory delay relay (windows,
automatic dimming rear view mirror
[including microphone and compass]
and door switch III)

Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
Do not probe the contacts for the fuses and relays in the power
distribution box as damage will occur, causing improper, or loss
of, electrical functionality.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
218

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1

Fuse Amp
Rating
80A*

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

—
—
30A*
20A*
40A*
40A*
40A*

9
10
11
12
13

30A*
30A*
—
—
15A**

Protected Circuits
Passenger compartment fuse
panel
Not used
Not used
Blower motor relay
Powerpoint (body)
Rear defroster
Cooling fan relay
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
pump
Wipers
ABS valve
Not used
Not used
Fuel pump relay
219

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
14
15

Fuse Amp
Rating
15A**
10A**

16
17
18
19
20

20A**
10A**
20A*
30A*
30A*

21
22
23

30A*
20A*
10A**

24
25
26

—
10A**
20A**

20A**

28
29
30
31
32
33

—
30A*
—
30A*
30A*
30A*

34
35
36
37
38
39

30A*
40A*
Diode
—
—
5A**

220

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Protected Circuits
Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)
Intercooler pump relay
(Shelby only)
Heated seats
Alternator sense
Auxiliary body module (ABM)
Starter relay
Rear amplifier
(Shaker 1000 radio)
Powertrain relay
Powerpoint (instrument panel)
Powertrain control module (PCM)
keep-alive power
Not used
A/C compressor relay
Left high intensity discharge
headlamp relay
Right high intensity discharge
headlamp relay
Not used
Passenger front window
Not used
Passenger power seat
Driver power seat
Front amplifier
(Shaker 500 radio)
Driver front window motor
Convertible top motor
Fuel diode
Not used
Not used
Rear defroster coil (Run/Start)

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
40

Fuse Amp
Rating
15A**

41
42

G8VA relay
G8VA relay

43
44
45
46

G8VA relay
G8VA relay
5A**
5A**

47
48

15A**
15A**

15A**

50
51
52
53
54
55
56

Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
Full ISO relay
High current
relay
57
Full ISO relay
58
High current
relay
* Cartridge Fuses ** Mini Fuses

Protected Circuits
PCM Vehicle Power 4 – ignition
coil
Fuel pump relay
Intercooler pump relay
(Shelby only)
A/C compressor relay
Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)
PCM Run/Start
PCM Vehicle Power 3 – general
powertrain components
PCM Vehicle Power 1
PCM Vehicle Power 5 –
transmission
PCM Vehicle Power 2 – emissions
related powertrain components
Cooling fan relay (high)
Blower motor relay
Starter relay
Rear defroster relay
Front wiper relay
Cooling fan relay (low)
Not used (Spare)
PCM relay
Not used (Spare)

Auxiliary relay with heated seats (if equipped)
On heated seat equipped vehicles, there is a relay box located under the
driver seat containing two relays for the driver and passenger heated
seats.
221

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should only be used if it is
supplied with your vehicle as part of the original temporary mobility
kit.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.

222

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
223

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, set the
parking brake and activate the
hazard flashers.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or
R (Reverse) (manual transmission)
and turn the engine off.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
224

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block both the front and rear of
the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire. For example, if the left
front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
2. Remove the lug wrench, spare
tire and jack.

225

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
3. Remove the center ornament (if
equipped) from the wheel. Loosen
each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.

4. Put the jack in the jack notch
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.

Never use the rear differential
as a jacking point.
WARNING: To lessen the
risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while changing a
tire. Do not start the engine when
your vehicle is on the jack. The
jack is only meant for changing
the tire.

5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear
to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary
spare tire.
226

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten
1
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
3
4
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
9. Put flat tire, wheel ornament (if
equipped), jack and lug wrench
5
2
away. Make sure the jack is fastened
so it does not rattle when you drive.
10. Unblock the wheel.
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary mobility kit (located in
the spare tire well in the trunk). The temporary mobility kit consists of
an air compressor to reinflate the tire and a sealing compound in a
canister that will effectively seal most punctures caused by nails or
similar objects. This kit will provide a temporary seal allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 120 miles (200 km) at a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to
be used for one tire only. See your Ford authorized dealer for additional
replacement sealant canisters.

227

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
1. Air compressor (inside)
2. Diverter knob
3. On/Off button
4. Air pressure gauge
5. Sealant bottle/canister
6. Sealant filling clear tube
7. Sealant tube — tire valve
connector
8. Yellow cap tool
9. Air compressor hose
10. Air hose — tire valve connector
11. Accessory power plug
12. Casing/housing

5
6

General information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than 1⁄4 inch (6.4 mm) or
damage to the tire’s sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.
Note: Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has become
severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient
air pressure. Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be
sealed with the temporary mobility kit.
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this
reason:
• Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not drive further than 120 miles (200 km). Drive only to the
closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the
tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed.
228

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
• Read the information in the Tips for use of the temporary mobility
kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and
your vehicle.
Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit
Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary
mobility kit:
• Before operating the temporary mobility kit, make sure your vehicle is
safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard
lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn’t move
unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the
tire.
• When using the temporary mobility kit, leave the engine running
(only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so
the compressor doesn’t drain the vehicle’s battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than
15 minutes; this will help prevent the compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is
operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex. Make sure that you use the
non-latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction.
• Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children.
• Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is
between -22°F (–30°C) and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before the use by date. The use by
date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the
sealant canister (bottle). Check the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years.
• Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or collision. Always store the kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
• When inflating a tire or other objects, use the black air hose only. Do
not use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application
only.
229

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
• Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical
disturbance in radio and DVD player operation.
What to do when a tire is punctured
A tire puncture within the tire’s tread area can be repaired in two stages
with the temporary mobility kit:
• In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been reinflated, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance (approximately 4 miles [6 km]) to distribute
the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to check the tire pressure and
adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle’s tire inflation pressure.
First stage: Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air
Preparation
Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving
traffic. Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and turn the
engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the
temporary mobility kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture
is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to
the tire valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the connection is tightly
fastened.

230

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
4. Plug the power cable into the 12V
power point in the vehicle.

5. Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash.
6. Start the engine (only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a
well-ventilated area).
7. Turn dial (1) counterclockwise to
the sealant position. Turn on the kit
by pressing the on/off button (2).

8. Inflate the tire to the pressure
listed on the tire label located on
the driver’s door or the door jam
area.

Note: When the sealing compound is first added into the tire, the
air pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a
higher value; this is normal and should be no reason for concern.
The pressure will drop after about 30 seconds of operation. The
231

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF
position to get the correct tire pressure reading.
WARNING: Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility
kit while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire’s sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
WARNING: If the tire doesn’t inflate to the recommended tire
pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.
9. When the recommended tire pressure is reached, turn off the kit by
pressing the on/off button; disconnect the kit from the tire valve and the
power point. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve, place the tube cap
on the metal connector, and return the kit to the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles (6 km)
to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to
the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Do not proceed
to the second stage of this operation.
11. After 4 miles (6 km), stop and check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
Second stage: Checking tire pressure
Check the air pressure of your tires as follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten
firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise.
WARNING: If you are proceeding from the First stage:
Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi
(1.4 bar), stop and call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is
above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
3. Turn the dial clockwise to the air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on/off button.
232

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
4. Adjust the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
from the tire label located on the
driver’s door or door jam area.
Note: The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by
pressing the on/off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the
kit to the stowage area.
WARNING: The power plug may get hot after use and should
be handled carefully while unplugging.
What to do after the tire has been sealed
After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire, you will need to
replace the sealant canister and clear tube (hose). Sealing compound
and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford
Motor Company dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant bottles may be
disposed of at home; however, liquid residue from the sealing compound
should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire
dealer, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has been used, the maximum vehicle
speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is
120 miles (200 km). The sealed tire should be inspected immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel
must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 miles (200 km)
by performing the procedure from Second stage: Checking tire
pressure listed previously.

233

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Removal of the sealant canister from the temporary mobility kit
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.

2. Locate the yellow cap at the end
of the clear tube.

3. Using the yellow cap tool, press
the tab located on the temporary
mobility kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant
canister.

234

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Installation of the sealant canister to the temporary mobility kit
1. Align the sealant canister with
the temporary mobility kit housing.

2. Once aligned, seat the sealant
canister by lightly pushing down
until you hear an audible click.

3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.

Note: If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation
of the sealant canister, consult your Ford Motor Company authorized
dealer for assistance.
235

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Be sure to check the sealant
compound’s “use by” date regularly.
The “use by” date is on the lower
right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister
(bottle). The sealant canister should be replaced after four years.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size

Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb
N•m
1⁄2 x 20
100
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
236

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must
use the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
237

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables

+
+

–

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.

+
+

–

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
238

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

+
+

–

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.

+
+

–

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
239

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables

+
+

–

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.

+
+

–

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.

240

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

+
+

–

3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.

+
+

–

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

241

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the front using wheel lift equipment,
it is recommended that the rear wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the transmission.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent
damage to the front fascia.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
242

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).

243

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft威 parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
by Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
244

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
245

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
246

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
247

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding to both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
248

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4

249

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.

250

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Using high pressure water or wand-type car washes may cause
damage to tape stripes if the nozzle is positioned closer than 12 inches
(30 cm) from the stripe.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from your
authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
251

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft威 Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.

252

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all
parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
4.0L V6 ENGINE

253

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
4.6L 3V V8 ENGINE

PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
254

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
Cleaner (ZC-23) in the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B, D, or F)] in Canada, available from your
authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
CONVERTIBLE TOP AND PADDED MOLDING
For vinyl tops, wash with Motorcraft威 Triple Clean (ZC-13), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
For cloth tops wash with a high quality convertible top
cleaner/protectant.
• Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive materials or cleaners.
• Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the
cleanability of vinyl material.
• Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the
convertible top and windows may cause water leaks and possible seal
damage.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
255

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
256

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.

257

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)

258

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking
brake and shift to P (Park). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal,
place the gearshift in 1 (First), and release the clutch pedal.
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, set the parking
brake and shift to P (Park). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, set the parking brake, press and hold the clutch pedal,
place the gearshift in N (Neutral), and release the clutch pedal.
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
259

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located on the
driver’s side kick panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with
the prop rod.

260

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.0L V6 engine

1. Battery
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Power distribution box

261

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
4.6L 3V V8 engine

262

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Engine shield
Some vehicles may be equipped
with an aero-shield under the
engine. This shield needs to be
removed for service, including oil
and filter changes. It is secured with
four screws.
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking
and smearing. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.

263

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to
release the blade from the arm and
pull the blade away from the arm to
remove it.

3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmissions) or 1 (First) (manual transmissions).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
264

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
• 4.0L V6 engine

• 4.6L V8 engine

6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes, the oil level
is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
265

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• If the oil level is below the lower hole, add enough oil to raise the
level within the lower and upper holes.
• 4.0L V6 engine

• 4.6L V8 engine

• Oil levels above the upper hole may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
266

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
4.0L V6 Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.

Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the
current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-30 or an equivalent SAE 5W-30 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C929-A. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this section for more information.
267

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
4.6L 3V V8 Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.

Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this section for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
268

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft威 maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its
life of service.

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
269

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
270

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.

LE
AD

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE

ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
271

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.

• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. If coolant is
filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is
not cool, the system will remain underfilled.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
272

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.
Make sure the correct coolant is used. DO NOT MIX recycled coolant
and new (unused) coolant together in the vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an
improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components
and may void the warranty. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
273

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
274

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (4.6L V8 engine
only)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge
area.

will move to the red (hot)
275

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate.
• The service engine soon indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
276

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft威 part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft威 fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
277

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

•

swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.

WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

278

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Refueling

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling. It can ignite
fuel vapors.

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump fuel
as normal.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, wait about five seconds before
slowly removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain
back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
279

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within
the fuel filler housing and to the ground.
If the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message
comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may
have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,
open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel
fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet
light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check
fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause
the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.

Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
280

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as
(R+M)/2 METHOD
“Regular” with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels
below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.

Octane recommendations (4.6L V8 engine)
Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel without
damaging the engine, but premium fuel with an octane rating of 91
(R+M)/2 or higher is recommended for best overall performance.
For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500
Supplement.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded
gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles
designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these
problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your
authorized dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
281

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
282

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
1. Locate the white plastic funnel. It
is included with the tire changing
tools. (For vehicles equipped with
the temporary mobility kit, the
funnel is located in the spare tire
well in the trunk).

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel™ system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has
been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
283

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
284

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
285

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact
your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
286

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
287

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
indicator stays on
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
288

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel to its furthest point
(until it stops) left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Brake and clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.
289

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
The 5R55S transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. Use only
MERCON威 V automatic transmission fluid. The type of fluid used is
indicated on the transmission fluid pan, extension housing. Refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage and void the warranty.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

290

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)

1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level.
3. Note: There are two different manual transmissions used in this
vehicle and they have different fluid levels. For vehicles equipped with a
V6 engine, the correct manual transmission fill level is at the lower edge
of the filler hole. For vehicles equipped with a V8 engine, the correct
manual transmission fill level is 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) below the edge of the
filler hole.Note: For vehicles equipped with a V6 engine, the correct
manual transmission fill level is at the lower edge of the filler hole. For
vehicles equipped with a V8 engine, the correct manual transmission fill
level is 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) below the edge of the filler hole.

291

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• Fill level for V6

• Fill level for V8

4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening to bring the fluid up to
the recommended levels.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

292

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the air filter element
V6 engine

V8 engine

1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
3. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
5. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps. Be sure
that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.

293

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Fuel filter
Battery
Oil filter
Spark Plugs

4.0L V6 engine
FA-1773
FG-1083
BXT-96R
FL-820-S

4.6L V8 engine
FA-1897
FG-1083
BXT-96R
FL-820-S

For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.

294

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Cooling system stop
leak pellets
—

Motorcraft威 Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
with bittering agent
(yellow-colored)3
Motorcraft威 Cooling
System Stop Leak
Pellets

12.5 quarts
(11.8L)
13.6 quarts
(12.9L)

Silicone Lubricant

Multi-Purpose Grease

—

Door weatherstrips

Ford part name or
equivalent
Motorcraft威 High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid

—

Between MIN and
MAX lines on
reservoir

Brake fluid and (clutch
fluid-if equipped)

Door latch, hood latch,
auxiliary hood latch,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
Engine coolant
(4.0L engine)
Engine coolant
(4.6L engine)

Capacity

Item

MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES

VC-6 /
WSS-M99B37-B6

VC-7-B /
WSS-M97B51-A1

XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B

XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A

PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1

Ford part number /
Ford Specification

Maintenance and Specifications

295

296

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Engine oil
(4.6L engine)

Engine oil
(4.0L engine)

Item

Ford part name or
equivalent
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
5.0 quarts (4.7L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)6
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)6
Capacity

•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A with API
Certification Mark

•XO-5W30-QSP (US)
•XO-5W-30-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W30-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W30-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C929-A and API
Certification Mark

Ford part number /
Ford Specification

Maintenance and Specifications

—
Fill to between
MIN and MAX
lines on reservoir

Lock cylinders
Power steering fluid
Rear axle fluid 7.5 inch
axle
3.25 pints (1.5L)
(4.0L engine)
Rear axle fluid 8.8 inch
axle
4.25 pints (2.0L)
(4.6L engine)
Automatic transmission
11.9 quarts
fluid
(11.2L)4
Manual transmission
2.75 quarts
fluid
(2.6L)5
(4.0L engine)
Manual transmission
fluid
3.2 quarts (3.0L)5
(4.6L engine)

Capacity

Item

XY-75W140-QL /
WSP-M2C192-A

XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V

Motorcraft威
MERCON威 V ATF2

Motorcraft威
MERCON威 V ATF

XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V

Ford part number /
Ford Specification
XL-1 /
None

Motorcraft威 SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant1

Motorcraft威
MERCON威 V ATF

Ford part name or
equivalent
Motorcraft威 Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant

Maintenance and Specifications

297

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

3.6 quarts (3.4L)
16.0 gallons
(60.6L)

Windshield washer fluid
Fuel tank

—

Ford part name or
equivalent
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
—

ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2

Ford part number /
Ford Specification

Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles.
Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle
has been submerged in water.
2
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 V should only use MERCON威 V fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Approximate dry capacity, including cooler and tubes. Fluid level should be checked by an
authorized dealer.
5
Service refill capacity is covered under Checking and adding manual transmission fluid in this
chapter.
6
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C929-A (4.0L) or WSS-M2C930-A (4.6L) and the API
Certification mark.

Capacity

Item

Maintenance and Specifications

298

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
Compression ratio

4.0L V6 engine
245
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
EDIS
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
9.7:1

4.6L V8 engine
281
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
0.039–0.043 inch
(1.0–1.1 mm)
9.8:1

For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500
Supplement.
Engine drivebelt routing

• 4.0L V6 Engine

• 4.6L V8 Engine
299

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.

300

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.

Description
Five-speed manual (T5)
Five-speed manual (TR3650)
Five-speed automatic (5R55S)

Code
F
K
L
301

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Body kits
Bug shields
Chrome exhaust tip
Fuel door
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Hood scoop
Racing stripes
Rear spoilers
Side scoops
Splash guards
Side window deflectors
Wheels
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
302

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Accessories
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Cargo organization and management
Peace of mind
Full vehicle covers
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.

303

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威 Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
304

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades
• Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs
• Shock absorbers
(except California)
• Clutch disc
• Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.

305

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan

306

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Index
A
Accessory delay ..........................79
AdvanceTrac ..............................197
AdvanceTrac Sport Mode .........202
Air cleaner filter ...............292–294
Air conditioning ....................51, 54
manual heating and air
conditioning system .................51
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................129–130, 137
and child safety seats ............131
description ......................130, 137
disposal ....................................140
driver airbag ....................132, 138
indicator light .........................140
operation .........................132, 138
passenger airbag .............132, 138
side airbag ...............................137
AM/FM .........................................32
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................271
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................195–196
Anti-theft system ..............101, 104
arming the system ..................105
disarming a triggered
system .....................................106
Audio system (see Radio) .........32
Automatic transmission ............204
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................204
fluid, adding ............................290
fluid, checking ........................290
fluid, refill capacities ..............295
fluid, specification ..................295
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....41
Auxiliary power point .................76

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Axle
lubricant specifications ..........295
refill capacities ........................295
traction lok ..............................202
B
Battery .......................................269
acid, treating emergencies .....269
battery saver .............................59
jumping a disabled battery ....237
maintenance-free ....................269
replacement, specifications ...294
servicing ..................................269
Belt-Minder威 .............................125
Booster seats .............................156
Brakes ........................................195
anti-lock ...........................195–196
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................196
fluid, checking and adding ....289
fluid, refill capacities ..............295
fluid, specifications .................295
lubricant specifications ..........295
parking ....................................196
shift interlock ..........................203
Bulbs ............................................64
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....295
Cargo cover .................................89
CD ................................................32
Cell phone use ..............................8
Changing a tire .........................222
Child safety seats ......................145
attaching with tether
straps .......................................151
in front seat ............................146
307

Index
in rear seat ..............................146
LATCH .....................................149
recommendations ...................143
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................156
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............253
instrument panel ....................255
interior .....................................256
plastic parts ............................254
washing ....................................251
waxing .....................................252
wheels ......................................252
wiper blades ............................254
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......51, 54
Clock adjust
AM/FM .......................................33
Clutch
fluid ..........................................289
operation while driving ..........207
recommended shift speeds ....208
Compass, electronic ....................73
calibration .................................74
set zone adjustment .................74
Console ........................................75
Controls
power seat ...............................111
steering column ........................84
Convertible ..................................85
cleaning ...................................255
installation of the boot .............86
lowering the convertible top ...85
raising the convertible top ......88
Coolant
checking and adding ..............271
refill capacities ................274, 295
specifications ..........................295
308

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................80
Customer Assistance ................212
Ford Extended
Service Plan ............................304
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................248
Getting roadside assistance ...212
Getting the service
you need .................................244
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................249
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................247
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................61
Defrost
rear window and rearview
mirrors .......................................54
windshield .................................54
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................290
engine oil .................................264
Driving under special
conditions ..................................206
through water .........................211
E
Electronic message center ...20–21
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................237
running out of fuel .........237, 282
Emission control system ..........286
Engine ........................................299

Index
cleaning ...................................253
coolant .....................................271
fail-safe cooling .......................275
idle speed control ...................269
lubrication specifications .......295
refill capacities ........................295
service points ..................261–262
Engine block heater .................193
Engine oil ..................................264
checking and adding ..............264
dipstick ....................................264
filter, specifications ................294
refill capacities ........................295
specifications ..........................295
Event data recording ....................7
Exhaust fumes ..........................193
F
Fail safe cooling ........................275
Fluid capacities .........................295
Fog lamps ....................................60
Fuel ............................................277
calculating fuel
economy ............................28, 283
cap ...........................................279
capacity ...................................295
choosing the right fuel ...........280
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................286
detergent in fuel .....................282
filler funnel .............................282
filling your vehicle
with fuel ..................277, 279, 283
filter, specifications ........277, 294
fuel pump shut-off switch .....214
improving fuel economy ........283
octane rating ...................281, 299
quality ......................................281
running out of fuel .........237, 282

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................277
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......214
Fuses ..................................214–215
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............279
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................283
Gauges .........................................17
H
Hazard flashers .........................213
Headlamps ...................................59
aiming ........................................62
autolamp system .......................59
bulb specifications ....................65
daytime running lights .............61
flash to pass ..............................61
high beam .................................61
replacing bulbs .........................66
turning on and off ....................59
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .................................51, 54
Hood ..........................................260
I
Ignition ...............................190, 299
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................145
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................288
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................255
cluster ........................................12
309

Index
lighting up panel
and interior ...............................62

Lug nuts ....................................236
Lumbar support, seats .............111

Jack ............................................222
positioning ...............................222
storage .....................................222
Jump-starting your vehicle ......237

Manual transmission .................207
fluid capacities ........................295
lubricant specifications ..........295
reverse .....................................208
Message center .....................20–22
display color ..............................24
english/metric button ...............26
MyColor display ........................24
system check button ................22
warning messages .....................29
Mirrors ...................................79–80
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................79
heated ........................................54
side view mirrors (power) .......80
Motorcraft威 parts ......258, 277, 294

K
Keyless entry system
autolock ...............................92, 94
Keys .....................................91, 102
positions of the ignition .........190
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................59
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................65
daytime running light ...............61
fog lamps ...................................60
headlamps .................................59
headlamps, flash to pass ..........61
instrument panel, dimming .....62
interior lamps .....................64, 66
replacing bulbs .........................66
LATCH anchors .........................149
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........196
Limited slip axle
(see Traction Loc) ....................202
Load limits .................................180
Locks ............................................91
autolock ...............................92, 94
doors ..........................................91
Lubricant specifications ...........295
310

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

N
Navigation system .......................50
O
Octane rating ............................281
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................264
P
Parking brake ............................196
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........294
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................117
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................218

Index
Power mirrors .............................80
Power point .................................76
Power steering ..........................202
fluid, checking and adding ....289
fluid, refill capacity ................295
fluid, specifications .................295
Power Windows ...........................76
R
Radio ............................................32
6-CD in dash .............................32
Rear-view camera system .........209
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................143
Relays ........................................214
Remote entry system ...........96–97
illuminated entry ....................100
locking/unlocking doors .....97–98
opening the trunk .....................98
panic alarm ...............................98
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................100
replacing the batteries .............99
Roadside assistance ..................212
S
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..........115, 118, 120–123
Safety Canopy ...........................137
Safety defects, reporting ..........250
Safety restraints ...............115, 118,
120–124
Belt-Minder威 ...........................125
extension assembly ................124
for adults .........................120–123

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

for children .............................140
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................117
warning light and
chime ...............................124–125
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................149
Safety seats for children ..........145
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................300
Satellite Radio Information ........47
Seats ..........................................107
child safety seats ....................145
climate control ..........................54
front seats ...............................110
heated ................................51, 113
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................101
Servicing your vehicle ..............259
Setting the clock .........................33
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............140
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................294, 299
Specification
chart, lubricants ........................295
Speed control ..............................80
Starting your
vehicle ........................190–191, 193
jump starting ..........................237
Steering wheel
controls ......................................84
tilting .........................................73
Stereo
6-CD in dash .............................32
CD-MP3 .....................................32
SYNC威 ..........................................50
311

Index
T
Temporary mobility kit .............227
Tilt steering wheel ......................73
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....175
Tires ...........................160–161, 222
alignment ................................168
care ..........................................164
changing ..........................222, 224
checking the pressure ............164
inflating ...................................162
label .........................................174
replacing ..................................166
rotating ....................................168
safety practices .......................167
sidewall information ...............169
snow tires and chains ............179
spare tire .................................222
Temporary mobility kit ..........227
terminology .............................161
tire grades ...............................161
treadwear ........................160, 165
Towing .......................................187
recreational towing .................189
trailer towing ..........................187
wrecker ....................................242
Traction Control Sport Mode ...202
Traction-lok rear axle ...............202
Transmission
automatic operation ...............204
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....203

312

2010 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)

fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................290
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................291
fluid, refill capacities ..............295
lubricant specifications ..........295
manual operation ....................207
Trunk ...........................................95
remote release ....................89, 98
Turn signal ..................................64
U
USB port ......................................43
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................300
Vehicle loading ..........................180
Ventilating your vehicle ...........193
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................263
Water, Driving through .............211
Windows
power .........................................76
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................72
checking and adding fluid .....263
replacing wiper blades ...........264
Wrecker towing .........................242

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Pub Date                        : 2008-10
Pubtype                         : Owner Guide
Version                         : 3rd Print
Model Year                      : 2010
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Language                        : English
Supercedes                      : false
Market                          : USA
Model Name List                 : 197
Keywords                        : 
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2009:11:19 14:48:10Z
Create Date                     : 2009:11:19 14:48:10Z
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Ford
Description                     : 
Creator                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:14c836d4-2d0e-4f51-89bc-ce6a8e1a5f1b
Instance ID                     : uuid:48b433c0-3404-4060-bf24-67ebcb65afe6
Page Count                      : 312
Subject                         : 
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Ford 2010 Mustang Owners Manual